Owners Manual

Owners Manual
2014 Cherokee
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14KL74-126-AF
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all tion.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher
center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll
over when some other vehicles may not.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
remain with the vehicle when sold.
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts prosymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
1
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN number also is stamped into the right
front body, on the right front seat cross member (visible
through an opening in the carpet) and appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the
title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .61
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .62
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .73
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . .114
. . .115
. . .115
. . .116
. . .117
. . .119
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM).
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Ignition Node (KIN).
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the press of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
the press of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up 1 — OFF
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
press to operate the ignition switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will
display in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key ment Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node possible by an authorized dealer.
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are proCAUTION!
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank • Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
if an invalid Key Fob.
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
security protection.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not combulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sysindicates that there is a problem with the system. In
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
starting problems and loss of security protection.
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Replacement Keys
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
subject to the following conditions:
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
• This device must accept any interference that may be Rearming Of The System
received, including interference that may cause unde- If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
sired operation.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
by the party responsible for compliance could void the after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
And Operating⬙ for further information).
door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will promake sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-Nwill pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
will flash.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
(if equipped), refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in
further information).
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
further information.
(RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
3. If any doors are open, close them.
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N- The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Go™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previturn the key to the ON position.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
NOTE:
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Security System Manual Override
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(extreme bottom position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition activate the system.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitNOTE:
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Flash Lights With Remote Key
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inPush and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
formation.
to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Sound Horn With Lock
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
and horn will remain on.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Using The Panic Alarm
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal and
gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
Transmitter Case
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
following conditions:
radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry engine will remote start:
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve• Gear Selector in PARK
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Doors closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hood closed
NOTE:
• Liftgate closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• Hazard switch off
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• Vehicle alarm system not active
• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™ vehicle
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a Vehicle
15 minute cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
NOTE:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
in the Remote Start mode.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC/DID until you
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
push the START button.
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
ON/RUN position.
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
NOTE:
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
EVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to “Elec- deactivated through the Uconnect® SETTINGS. For more
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
Information Display” in “Understanding Your Instru- refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel.”
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob
in the vehicle. Place the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
4. Any door is opened.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect®
Settings in your radio.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
certain it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
tem, always test the door from the inside to make vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
certain it is in the desired position.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrudoor handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
search in any passive entry vehicle.
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
liftgate automatically.
transmitter while a door is ajar.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
handle while a door is ajar.
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
the door is ajar.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open
with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic liftgate
release. For further information, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in
Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
press and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position).
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Window Lockout Switch
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when
you push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock
Driver Door 1st press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect®,
the liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic
release on the liftgate For further information, refer
to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
the electronic liftgate release.
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To Know Before Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pressing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel once will close the
liftgate only, this button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
Instrument Panel⬙.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
(0 km/h).
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
gate trim panel.
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate switches.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for • If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
detection of an obstruction.
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
Some of the most important safety features in your
energy during an impact event
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
positions
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
item in a seat — if equipped
wheel
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride their arm.
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air You should read the instructions provided with your
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
folded webbing.
you will prefer a higher position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
feature for each seating position.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Driver
Center
Passenger
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
If Equipped
Third Row
N/A
N/A
N/A
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
• N/A — Not Applicable
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will Energy Management Feature
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
locking mode.
the occupant’s chest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioning
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert®)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
pants, including those in child restraints.
fastened.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the best way to keep the baby safe.
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers the force if there is a collision.
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
Seat Belt Extender
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended,
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if so equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
deactivating BeltAlert®.
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with tender, and store it.
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
panel below the steering column and a Supplemental
Passenger Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the glove compartment.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
1 — Driver Advanced Front
Air Bag
2 — Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
4 — Supplemental Passenger
Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for air bags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front and rear seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon Occupant Classification System (OCS) that may adjust
seat position.
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon occupant weight.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether NOTE:
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front and Side Impact Sensors
system components:
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
• Steering Wheel and Column
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Instrument Panel
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
used for more severe collisions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam on the side
of the seat’s trim cover (front seats) and between the side
seat’s cushion trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and
a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver and Passenger Side Knee Air Bags and the knee bolsters to
provide improved protection for the driver and front
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced
protection and work together with the Advanced Front
Air Bags during a frontal impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the provide improved protection for the driver and front
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front improve occupant protection.
Air Bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Passenger Knee Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
required for this vehicle.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. frontal collisions, including some that may produce subBased on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Supple- the other hand, depending on the type and location of
mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Passen- impact, Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental
ger Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners, Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags may deploy in
as required, depending on several factors, including the crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
severity and type of impact.
produce a severe initial deceleration.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in type of collision.
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
WARNING!
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
• OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat
WARNING! (Continued)
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
• Air Bag Warning Light
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the sensors estimate that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it; or
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pasthis vehicle.
senger, including a child; or
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward
following:
facing infant seat; or
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the
front passenger seat
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rearward-facing
infant seat*
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Front Passenger Air
Bag Classification
Reduced-power
deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including
a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the
front passenger seat occupant’s most probable classification. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front
passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should
be modified.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
2
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improperly may cause the OCS to not classify the passenger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat
belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright
position, your back against the seat back, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not
carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.)
while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may cause the OCS to not classify the passenger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel)
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the
latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front
under the front passenger.
passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully
latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may
will turn on whenever
The Air Bag Warning Light
result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight.
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the The passenger seat assembly contains critical components that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag
operation of the air bag system.
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
designed. Do not make any modifications to the front
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
service immediately.
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™ any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional informa- be used.
tion). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
WARNING! (Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
WARNING!
Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere
with the latch before closing the seat. In addition,
after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin,
make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed
downward and fully latched to the base. Overstuffing the storage bin, or a not fully latched passenger
seat cushion, may result in misclassification of the
front passenger’s weight. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision.
A modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the
instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and
below the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/ you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
glove box surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 milli- especially applies to children.
seconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about oneinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to event the ORC will determine whether to have the
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
until the ignition is cycled to off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC •
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
•
Enhanced Accident Response System
•
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the •
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
Unlock the doors automatically.
Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.
Turn Off the HVAC Blower Motor.
Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Child Restraints
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown in the vehicle by the seat belt.
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardWARNING!
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
collision. The child could be badly injured or
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
directions exactly when installing an infant or
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
child restraint.
allowed by the child seat.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
All children whose weight or height is above the
because it can loosen the child restraint attachforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
booster seat position.
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs
(22 and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in 4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
(145 cm) tall.
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert Children Too Large For Booster Seats
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”. Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
buckle.
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
(Continued)
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out
of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for
using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
No
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
All three rear seating positions have
removable head restraints.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
There are tether strap anchorages behind each seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
rear seating position located on the back of the position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
seat.
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH—compatible
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower LATCH—compatible position in your vehicle
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a system at the same time. If you can fit three child
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten install the center child restraint and you must use the
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)
behind the front passenger.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the child seats do not block the center seat belt
webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to
restraint an occupant or child restraint in the center
seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and
D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating position (3) for any occupant. The center
child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
position.
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B,
and D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You must use
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in
position (3), behind the driver. You may use either
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing the child seat in position (1), behind the
front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatIf the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
WARNING!
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
The head restraints may be removed in
every rear seating position.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
attach a tether anchor.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
more room for the car seat.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
Tether Anchorage Locations
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
side of the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “MaintePets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Defroster
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Floor Mat Safety Information
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
The light should come on and remain on for
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Air Bag Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .128
▫ Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .135
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .136
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .167
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .154
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .159
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . .181
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .181
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .183
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . .185
. . .186
. . .186
. . .187
. . .187
. . .187
. . .188
. . .189
. . .192
. . .193
. . .194
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . .
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
With Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .199
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . .
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . .
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .204
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .205
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .208
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . .216
. . . .216
. . . .221
. . . .221
. . . .222
. . . .223
. . . .232
. . . .232
. . . .233
. . . .233
. . . .234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .238 䡵 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense®
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Active Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .240
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .286
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .254
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .287
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .255
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .290
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .256
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .299
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .298
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .304
䡵 WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED . .305
▫ Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .315
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Cargo Extension Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops . . . . . . . .314
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .319
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
Mobile features.
a 9-1-1 button.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The ORC turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
ORC system immediately.
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
red.
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
• The Phone Screen will display the following message stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your are not limited to, the following factors:
dealer.”
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
•
•
•
•
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
properly.
damaged during a crash.
General Information
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
nected during a vehicle crash.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
are unavailable or obstructed.
this device must accept any interference received, includEquipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
CAUTION!
• Wireless network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Power Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight door trim panel.
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left And Right Mirror Select
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Models With Express Window Feature
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position
following an adjustment.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
will automatically unfold.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
following occurs:
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
unfolded.
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
contamination so that the BSM system can function
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deproperly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
tection zones.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Entering From The Rear
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtaking/Approaching
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
WARNING!
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system will respond with both visual and audible
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approis also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
muted.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio is also muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
General Information
SEATS
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications vehicle.
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
WARNING!
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Power Seat Recliner Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Lumbar Switch
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
WARNING!
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by The front heated seats control buttons are located within
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
once to turn the High
• Press the heated seat button
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
setting On.
• Press the heated seat button
the Low setting On.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements Off.
a third time to turn
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
Seat Height Adjustment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
air from the passenger compartment and pull air through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and LOW.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandThe front ventilated seats control buttons are located ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Head Restraints
once to choose
• Press the ventilated seat button
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
HIGH.
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
choose LOW.
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to your ear.
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push Button
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions UP and
DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
WARNING! (Continued)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi- Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
easily.
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
WARNING!
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, have latched.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Lower The Rear Seat
To Raise The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
the middle outer edge of the seat.
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Recliner Adjustment
WARNING!
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), if equipped, will display which memory position is being set.
Driver Memory Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into • For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
memory as follows:
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
1. Turn the ignition ON.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefercan be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
equipped. If the Recall Memory with Remote Key
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
Unlock is not turned on in (EVIC)/Customerswitch, then press the number (2) button within five
Programmable Features then the Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display which
will not be successful. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
memory position is being set.
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
NOTE:
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC, if equipped.
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
the RKE transmitter.
transmitter within 10 seconds.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the
memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following: NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC, if equipped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
display in the EVIC, if equipped.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)
recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
previously set position when you place the ignition
be selected.
into the ACC or RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) Two latches must be released to open the hood.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers
side of the instrument panel.
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “CustomerProgrammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4A/
8.4AN Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Hood Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the center front
edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the third detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the system is
on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out
of the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headvehicle in an unlit area.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the If Equipped
delay.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
turn off in the normal manner.
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
NOTE:
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of from high beams to low beams until the approaching
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this vehicle is out of view.
feature.
NOTE:
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruinformation.
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights To Activate
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
position.
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high- at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
To Deactivate
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
ignition off.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
operation of low beams).
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
dealer.
reactivate the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when- The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the
headlights are off, the transmission is moved out of
“Park” position, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
NOTE:
Lane Change Assist
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
three times then automatically turn off.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
High/Low Beam Switch
defective.
Turn Signals
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
turn signal on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pressing a
switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off,
press the switch a second time. These lights also turn on
when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed,
There
are
courtesy
lights located above the front seats.
or when the dimmer control is turned completely upThe
courtesy
lights
can
be turned on by pressing the lens.
ward to the second detent.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off cupholders — if equipped.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Interior Lights
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Dome Light Position
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Windshield Washer Operation
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Mist Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperaYour vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
ture is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
conditions:
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, the
blower speed level is greater than 5, and when the This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperato activate this feature.
ture is below 40° F (4.4° C).
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temwiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
shield.
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever/gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
To
unlock
the
steering
column, push the control handle
steering column.
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the steering column in position, push the control The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not
turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
handle upward until fully engaged.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element On.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element Off.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
3
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
(40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To Deactivate
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed from memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above Metric Speed (km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
To Vary The Speed Setting
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
the new set speed will be established.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
U.S. Speed (mph)
the new set speed will be established.
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the To Accelerate For Passing
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
WARNING!
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
Control.
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When the brakes are overheated.
plays “ACC Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not
using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you
do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the
set speed. If this occurs:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
will display the set speed.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel
To Turn Off
The following conditions cancel the system:
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
To Resume
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two To Increase Speed
seconds, then the driver will either have to press the While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to pressing the SET + button.
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
U.S. Speed (mph)
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
flected in the EVIC display.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC display.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is repressing the SET - button.
flected in the EVIC display.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
the vehicle.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
seconds the driver will either have to press the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting • The distance setting is changed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
ACC Activation).
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle ahead.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Overtake Aid
ACC Operation At Stop
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this existing Set Speed.
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
be cancelled.
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system the following displays in the EVIC:
will be cancelled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC:
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
ACC SET
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster.
The information it displays depends on ACC system When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
status.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
• Distance Setting Change
Warning
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
• System Off
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
• ACC Proximity Warning
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• ACC Unavailable Warning
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC/
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
five seconds of no ACC display activity
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
this warning may temporarily occur.
require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
malfunction.
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterWindshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomdriving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
ACC/FCW operation.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
temporarily occur.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- examine the windshield and the camera located on the
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that created limited functionality is no Precautions While Driving With ACC
longer present, the system will return to full functionality. In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectFront Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or intervene.
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward Towing A Trailer
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
3
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Turn Or Bend Example
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
To change between the different control modes, press the To Set A Desired Speed
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONreached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSET (-) button and release. Release the acceling to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con- erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
trol mode.
Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL
SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating what speed
WARNING!
was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed
control is SET.
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. To Vary The Speed Setting
Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your To Increase Speed
vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware
which mode is selected. Failure to follow these When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conwarnings can result in a collision and death or trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
U.S. Speed (mph)
in the EVIC display.
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
To Decrease Speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in the EVIC display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The brake pedal is applied.
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h • The CANCEL button is pressed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysbutton results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the • The vehicle parking brake is applied.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overflected in the EVIC display.
heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
20 mph (32 km/h).
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
memory if:
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
ON/OFF button is pressed.
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
• The ignition is turned off.
To Turn Off
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
FCW Message
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
force as required.
message will be deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range,
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Forward Collision Button
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
driver after ignition shut down.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
ment Panel” for further information.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
higher rate of speed.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
FCW Limited Warning
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
through the instrument cluster to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no below the Uconnect® display.
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
LaneSense Warning Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
Sense On” message is shown in the EVIC.
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
Lane Sense On Message
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray • When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
indicator is solid white when only the left lane markand the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn
solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
3
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7.0 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray • When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
indicator is solid white when only the left lane markand the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
3
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
The LaneSense system has settings that you can config- IF EQUIPPED
ure the intensity of the torque warning and the warning The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
zone sensitivity (early/late) through the Uconnect® sys- and audible indications of the distance between the rear
tem screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
NOTE:
recommendations.
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle speed is too
fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Sensors
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
the park assist ready system status.
ParkSense® Display
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs —
Left
None
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast
Continuous
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the system, the instrument cluster will display the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the Uconnect® display.
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not
operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clusbumper.
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
• When you move the shift lever/gear selector to the
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off
via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
audible indications of the distance between the rear
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis- • The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collidsion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
ing with a detected obstacle.
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an • The automatic braking function may not be applied
obstacle.
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/ NOTE:
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features • The driver is always responsible for controlling the
section of the Uconnect® System.
vehicle.
• ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
state for the automatic braking function through ignisubstitute the driver.
tion cycles.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obvehicle’s movements.
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limiIf your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transmission, tations of this system and recommendations.
the automatic braking function in REVERSE gear is not
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
available.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual transmission). If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift
lever positions, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
EVIC indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Rear Park Assist
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
the park assist ready system status.
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left
None
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs — Right
None
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single
1/2- Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast
Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the
2nd flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound
When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for
tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.
manual transmission, the ParkSense® Warning screen
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle.
Front Park Assist
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
No Tone/Solid Arc
No Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs — Center
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs — Right
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
None
None
Fast
Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the Uconnect® display.
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ParkSense® Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display a
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENsystem operating properly.
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
message appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
radio when it is sounding a tone.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
application to be delayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
must intervene as required.
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect®
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to display.
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, • Touching the steering wheel during active steering
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once
guidance into the parking space.
(LED turns on).
• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
switch.
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again
• Driver’s door is opened.
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off • Rear liftgate is opened.
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when • The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic
searching for a parking space.
transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
active steering guidance into the parking space.
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
operate and search for a parking space when the follow- 15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC will instruct the driver to
ing conditions are present:
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or
must then reactivate the system by pressing the
in a forward gear (manual transmission).
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
• Driver’s door is closed.
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park
• Rear liftgate is closed.
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
present.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for • The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the EVIC
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruddesire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
switch to change your parking space setting.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a
parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
3
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
guidance into the parking space. The system will
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuprovide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
ver.
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic
transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward when instructed to, or when driver intervention is removement, the system will instruct the driver to check quired.
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the EVIC
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Parallel Park” message will appear in the EVIC display.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
3
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
NOTE:
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic
transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward when instructed to, or when driver intervention is removement, the system will instruct the driver to check quired.
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward when instructed to, or when driver intervention is removement, the system will instruct the driver to check quired.
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
vehicle above the rear License plate.
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has procenter line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
further information.
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of The following table shows the approximate distances for
the vehicle.
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink®
channels.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secubattery.
rity Alarm is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
button you want to program and the hand-held transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Rethe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
Do not release the button.
from slow to rapid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
remaining steps.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
view.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
several seconds of transmission.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigsuccessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indinals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transcator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
fully trained.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
time-out in the same manner.
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
door may open and close while you are programming.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink®
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Security
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightIf you unplugged the garage door opener/device for ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
programming, plug it back in at this time.
also be used at any time.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
Do not release the button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
WARNING!
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
WARNING!
Troubleshooting Tips
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
Power Shade Switches
Power Sunroof Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open positions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the
comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed
position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will
automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening). Press the switch rearward and release
it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. Closing Sunroof — Express
During Express Open operation, any movement of the Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiOpening Sunroof — Manual Mode
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
the sunroof.
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
open to the half open position prior to the sunroof closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
opening). Press and hold the switch rearward again, the forward again.
sunroof will open to the full open position and automatiVenting Sunroof — Express
cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half secpartially opened condition until the switch is pushed and ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
held rearward again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the The shade will open and stop automatically at the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
opening to the Vent position.
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
Opening Power Shade — Express
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
Closing Power Shade — Express
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
shade will automatically open to the full open position second and the shade will close automatically from any
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
During Express Open operation, any movement of the will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
shade switch will stop the shade.
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
completely.
Wind Buffeting
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
Pinch Protect Feature
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- minimize the buffeting or open any window.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Sunroof Maintenance
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
release to Express Close.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
to the battery and powered at all times.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door NOTE:
will cancel this feature.
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
Ignition OFF Operation
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
area.
3
Front Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the time by switching the rear power
outlet fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Rear Power Outlet Fuse
1 — F75 Fuse 20 A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
Console Bin
2 — F92 Fuse 20 A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
3 — F60 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the
device is unplugged.
Power Inverter Location
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current
to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones,
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses Wireless Charging Pad Operation
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
device.
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip 1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,
towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and
place and an LED indicator light.
change the location.
NOTE: Visit www.UconnectPhone.com for supported
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,
mobile phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle
to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle
moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and
adjusting the cradle in or out.
3
Mobile Phone Alignment
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi
logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing
green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone
and reposition it on the charging pad.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjustable Mobile Phone Charging Pad Cradle
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a
different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be
readjusted.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile
phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to
function normally as it is charging.
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature may
not work properly while a mobile phone is being
charged.
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile
phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s)
such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If
metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile
phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove
the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to
cool before removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could result in personal injury, including
burns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, located in the center armrest.
located in the center console.
CUPHOLDERS
3
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side
of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to
open the glove compartment.
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Glove Compartment
Console Storage Compartment
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
3
Upper Console Charging Pad
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage —
If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
Center Console Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
latches to the base.
section for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Extension Panels
WARNING!
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded.
When the rear seats are moved to the more forward
positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the
extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of
them). The extension panels can be used to extend the
load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between
the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large
items into the cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Retractable Cargo Area Cover
316 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
release the handle.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
WARNING!
make more room in the cargo area.
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert the
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
right spring-loaded post (located on the end of the cover
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger comparthousing) into the right attachment points.
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
Then, insert on the opposite end of the cover housing into from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 317
Rear Storage Bins
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle Rear Window Wiper/Washer
on the sides of the load floor.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Storage Bins
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
318 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to Rear Window Defroster
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
The rear window defroster button is located on
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn NOTE:
off.
• The Windsheild Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
turned on and when the ambient temperature is below
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
40 degrees F (4.4° C).
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned • To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 319
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on
vehicles equipped with Skyslider®.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a Chrysler dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
320 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .323
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .325
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .326
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 7” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .360
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .368
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .388
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . .389
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .392
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .410
▫ Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Air Demister Outlet
2 — Air Outlet
3 — Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Controls
4 — Horn/Driver Air Bag
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Instrument Cluster
Electronic Speed Control
Storage Compartment
Radio
9 — Passenger Air Bag
10 — Glove Compartment
11 — Lower Switch Bank
12 — Uconnect® Hard
Controls/Climate Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Stop/Start Ignition Button
Trunk Release Button
Dimmer Switches
Headlight Switch
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display/
Odometer Display
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
(RPM x 1000).
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
2. High Beam Indicator
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
lights are on.
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
This indicator will illuminate when the park
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
lights or headlights are turned on.
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
6. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacThis light monitors various brake functions,
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
including brake fluid level and parking brake
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
dropped below a specified level.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condihydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake the brake fluid level checked.
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
12. Turn Signal Indicator
10. Speedometer
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conwill chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either
trol (ESC) is off.
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Indicates vehicle speed.
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel
pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
17. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is not require towing.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
16. Air Bag Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Vehicle Security Light
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 – seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
19. Stop/Start – If Equipped
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT/
RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start
status. This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function can go into “Autostop” mode.
20. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This indicates that the rear fog lights are illuminated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC Menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Info
instrument cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip Info
• Stop/Start – If Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Press the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
dealer for assistance.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac2. Brake Warning Light
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condidisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
1. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
This light warns of an overheated engine condi(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
proaches
H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
chime
will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for aphicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Main Display Area
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside
temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
5. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
6. Fuel Gauge
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
provides the driver with visual and steering
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use
of a turn signal.
• When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane
lines and LDW indicator are the color gray.
• When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines
change to white and the LDW indicator changes to
green.
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation,
the approaching lane line and the LDW indicator
change from white to yellow.
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
7. Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
8. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure WarnThis light indicates that there is excessive transing” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
11. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
Speed Control.
12. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
filler cap is loose.
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
10. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning
• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped
Telltale — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates and is active only in
This area displays the Manual Speed Assist
4WD Low range when either the HDC switch
(MSA) speed warning telltale.
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following
message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
caused an over temperature condition in the power
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condispeed control is ON. For further information,
tion no longer exists. Once driving conditions are
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Undersafe, then pull over and let vehicle idle. After five
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
minutes, the system will cool and return to normal
• Electronic Speed Control SET
operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
This light will turn on when the electronic
Operating” for further information.
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- NOTE:
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera13. Reconfigurable Telltale Display
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
• Power Steering System Over Temperature —
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
If Equipped
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme
for service.
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
A chime will sound for four minutes when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle).
If the charging system light remains on, it means that
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Secondary Air Bag Warning Light
This telltale indicates the Passenger
Air Bag Disabled (PAD) [if equipped]
is disabled.
14. 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
15. SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
16. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
CAUTION! (Continued)
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 7” Display
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
provides the driver with visual and steering
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use
of a turn signal.
• When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane
lines and LDW indicator are the color gray.
• When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines
change to white and the LDW indicator changes to
green.
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation,
the approaching lane line and the LDW indicator
change from white to yellow.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
4. Brake Warning Light
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
2. EVIC Selectable Display Area
This area displays selectable information (Compass,
Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).
3. Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the middle of the EVIC’s top
line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale — be driven several minutes before the updated temperaIf Equipped
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefor, temperature readings
This area displays the Manual Speed Assist
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
(MSA) speed warning telltale.
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmisSpeed Control.
sion range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
•
Selec
Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped
8. EVIC Selectable Display Area
The symbol illuminates and is active only in
This area displays selectable information (Compass,
4WD Low range when either the HDC switch
Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating the shift lever position. Refer to “Starting And Operating”.
11. Instructional Area
This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e.,
“Push Brake To Start”).
12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheeldrive operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run
the engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped
Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
provide increased torque at the wheels.
Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
• SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
filler cap is loose.
service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
13. Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/
This light will turn on when a ACC is not Submenu Area
operating and needs service. For further infor• The odometer display shows the total distance the
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
vehicle has been driven.
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
Your Vehicle”.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It
is a good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages and Submenus.
• Fuel Gauge
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge
approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for more
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Power Steering System Over Temperature —
If Equipped
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaIf the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
on the EVIC screen, it indicates that exin steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
treme steering maneuvers may have ocspeeds and during parking maneuvers.
curred, which caused an over temperature condition
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
in the power steering system. You will lose power
for service.
steering assistance momentarily until the over tem• Door Ajar
perature condition no longer exists. Once driving
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle.
more doors may be ajar.
After five minutes, the system will cool and return to
normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when
this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
• Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the OK button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following proce- Messages
dure.
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
• Service Airbag System
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times •
within 10 seconds.
•
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
•
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
•
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Fuel Low
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Service Antilock Brake System
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Power Steering
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Lights On
• Cruise Ready
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
• Battery Voltage Low
•
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Airbag System
• Service Transmission
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Service Shifter
• Door Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Doors Open
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Tailgate Open
• Washer Fluid Low
• Gear Not Available
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button to select or reset the following resettable submenus:
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Only
Speedometer
Oil Temp
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Speedometer Menu item is Coolant Temperature
highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK button to
Oil Life
change the speedometer scale from mph
Battery Voltage
to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll
through the information sub-menus and press the OK
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “AdapIf the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Pressure System” is displayed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
to the main menu.
Control Ready.”
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information. Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
Driver Assist Menu
EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
ACC SET
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
instrument cluster.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC LaneSense Menu
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense
• Distance Setting Change
system status and the conditions that need to be met. For
• System Cancel
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Driver Override
• System Off
Fuel Economy
• ACC Proximity Warning
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
L/100 km with Bargraph)
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The • Range To Empty (RTE)
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Trip Info
Stored Messages
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip icon is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip A information
will display the following:
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pressing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Screen Setup
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Setup feature allows you to change what information is
button until the Audio display icon is high- displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
lighted in the EVIC.
that information is displayed.
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Current MPG or L/100 km
Gear Display
• Trip A
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Trip B
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
Upper Right
Upper Left
• None
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Temp
• Time
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Current MPG or L/100 km
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• Trip A
• Range To Empty
• Trip B
• Average MPG or L/100 km
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To
Default Settings)
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Cancel
• Okay
Center
• None
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio Information
• Menu Title (Default Setting)
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back hard-keys located below the system.
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
turn the screen on.
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0/8.4 Settings
When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, touch and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either touch the back
arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
previous menu or touch the “X” soft-key to close out of
the settings screen. Touching the Up or Down Arrow
soft-keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
Uconnect® 5.0 — Press the SETTINGS hard-key to display the menu setting screen. Uconnect® 8.4 — Touch the
“Apps” soft-key, then touch the “Settings” soft-key to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock, Display
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On After pressing the “Display” soft-key the following setComfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass tings will be available:
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup.
• Display Mode
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
When in this display you may select one of the auto display
time.
settings. To change Mode status, touch and release the
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
soft-key, then touch the desired language soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
to return to the previous menu.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back • Units
arrow soft-key.
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
• Voice Response Length
arrow soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navisetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
gation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language
to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
Clock
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the “Clock” soft-key the following settings
will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a check-mark
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a previous menu.
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the” X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Set Time Minutes
Safety/Assistance
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
After touching the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
• Time Format
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
When in this display, you may select the time format you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, touch
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Lane Departure Torque — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure WarnWarning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Vehicle”.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REprovide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
zone start point.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, • ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Chime Volume —
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, If Equipped
touch and release the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
Display” button. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
and operating information.
Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in
• ParkSense® Front Park Assist Chime Volume —
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inIf Equipped
formation.
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected • ParkSense® Active Park Assist Braking —
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The If Equipped
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inRefer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understandformation.
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
and operating information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView® Backup Camera” softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Active ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide
Lines — If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• Fixed ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide Lines —
If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
“Rain Sensing” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
A check-mark appears next to setting indicating that the
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven systo return to the previous menu.
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, • Headlight Illumination On Approach
rotors, etc.).
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
After pressing the “Lights” soft-key the following set- interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
tings will be available.
previous menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apengine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
setting, touch the “Headlights Off Delay” soft-key,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, touch the “Auto High
Beams” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Turn signals With Lock
When this feature is selected, the Turn signals will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Turn
signals with Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” soft-key the followthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
ing settings will be available:
• Sound Horn With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto- the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NUnlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of • Memory To FOB — If Equipped
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is provehicle. To make your selection, touch the “Memory
grammed touching the handle more than once will only
Linked To FOB” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Heated
Auto-On Comfort
Seats” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setAfter touching the “Auto-On Comfort” soft-key the folting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
lowing settings will be available:
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Horn With Remote Start
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, After touching the “Engine Off Options” soft-key the
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until following settings will be available:
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • Easy Exit Seats
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
to return to the previous menu.
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
Compass Settings
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
After pushing the Compass Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Push the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and it may need to be calibrated. You may also calibrate
the compass by pushing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns
(in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until
the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Audio
After touching the “Audio” soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• Equalizer
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the “Surround Sound”
soft-key, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing the
back arrow soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After touching the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch following settings will be available:
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
touch the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Setup — If Equipped
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
After touching the “Radio Setup” soft-key the following
settings will be available.
Clear Personal Data
• Regional
After touching the “Clear Personal Data Settings” softWhen this feature is selected it forces regional service- key the following settings will be available:
following enabling automatic switching to network sta- • Clear Personal Data
tions. To change the Regional setting touch the “Off” or
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
“On” soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Perselected. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
sonal Data touch the “Yes” or “No” soft-key. A check
Restore Settings
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then touch
After pressing the “Restore Settings” soft-key the follow- the back arrow soft-key.
ing settings will be available:
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
• Restore Settings
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the “Yes” or “No”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows
an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the
USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Slot
3 — AUX Port
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset button.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
wiping from center to edge.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
center button will select the next available CD in the 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
player.
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from • This device may not cause harmful interference.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
eration.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
4
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control
2 — Front Blower Control
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
4 — Temperature Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
7 — MODE Control
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
Temperature Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the warmer temperatures.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
MAX A/C
Mode Control (Air Direction)
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
recirculated.
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the con- Panel Mode
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
Air is directed through the outlets in the instruto the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the for best windshield and side window defrosting.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help
Floor Mode
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a modes only when necessary.
small amount through the defrost and side win- Recirculation Control
dow demist outlets.
Press this button to choose between outside air intake or
Mix Mode
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
window demist outlets. This setting works best in the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
NOTE:
Air Outlets
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to airflow.
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. seat passengers.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Economy Mode
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
defogging, select the outside air position.
Floor modes.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
button.
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Soft-Keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
6. Blower Control
7. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen,
touch and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
blue arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen,
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or touch and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
snowy conditions.
red arrow soft-key for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX 11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind- Touch the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperashield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
when necessary.
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
8. Climate Control OFF Button
area indicates cooler temperatures.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
4
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And 4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-Keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Operation” for more information.
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return to the previous setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
window.
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
timer function.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
CAUTION!
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperaFailure to follow these cautions can cause damage to ture settings or on the touchscreen, touch and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear for warmer temperature settings.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
automatically exit Sync.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, touch and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Hard-Key
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
9. SYNC
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Touch the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the Soft-Key
passenger temperature setting with the driver tempera- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
ture setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
• Floor Mode
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
11. Modes
• Panel Mode
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window
demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
• Mix Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off snowy conditions.
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
• Bi-Level Mode
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and ON/OFF.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, touch and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
for cooler temperature settings.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the driver with independent temperature conNOTE:
trol. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, touch and slide the • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
mance.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if conditions
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
is ON.
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
Automatic Operation
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
comfort as quickly as possible.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasby selecting the Uconnect® customer-programmable
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
section of the manual.
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Winter Operation
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
selected in Manual operation.
Vacation Storage
Operating Tips
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
Summer Operation
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
The engine cooling system must be protected with a adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- of compressor damage when the system is started again.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
periods, as fogging may occur.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- tions.
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .426
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .426
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .423
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .435
▫ 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System —
䡵 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . .
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELEC-TERRAIN™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . .
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . .
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . .451
. . .455
. . .456
. . .457
. . .458
. . .459
. . .459
. . .462
. . .462
. . .463
. . .464
. . .466
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .470 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .492
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .495
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .504
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .506 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .508
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .527
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .514 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .522
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Recreational Towing — 4WD Models With
1-Speed Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .543
▫ Recreational Towing — 4WD Models With
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Normal Starting
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
Extended Park Starting procedure.
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
procedure.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
5
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
WARNING!
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the
starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
With Tip Start
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the decrease as the engine warms up.
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
driver’s side headlamp.
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet NOTE:
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below —20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required. • The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps • The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
below to properly use the engine block heater:
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
WARNING!
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition switch is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission. The transmission gear
range (PRND) is displayed both beside the shift lever and
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever
and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK,
or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this secInterlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK tion). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a preout of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are selfON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
pedal must be pressed.
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond
this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-)
or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Shift Lever
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiNEUTRAL into another gear range.
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
grade.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged DRIVE (D)
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
This range should be used for most city and highway
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downthe transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
NOTE: Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristhat limit your response to changing traffic or road tics under all normal operating conditions.
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter
clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damThis mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
aging the transmission.
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
following steps:
center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
further information.
1. Stop the vehicle.
SPORT — IF EQUIPPED
Transmission Limp Home Mode
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear
in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift
lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top
available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the DRIVE position.
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
WARNING!
you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
through the lower gears normally.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears.
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever forward (-). The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive
(4WD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
1-Speed 4WD Switch
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
rear wheels.
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain Switch
2-Speed 4WD Switch
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
range position can be used to provide an additional gear
reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the driveline components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be seriously or fatally injured if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the
vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4WD LOW
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for further information on the various positions and their
intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Shifting Out Of 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message
will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
Selec-Terrain Switch
the requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforNOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a mesmation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Insage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
strument Panel” for further information.
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
drive
shafts
from the powertrain and will allow the
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being propvehicle
to
move
regardless of the transmission posierly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
tion.
The
parking
brake should always be applied
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
when
the
driver
is
not in the vehicle.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow
transmission to PARK.
the shift.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
WARNING!
do not start the engine.
You or others could be seriously or fatally injured if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located above the selector switch) for four seconds.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinkstays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
8. Start the engine.
complete.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
Repeat these Steps to shift out of NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System —
If Equipped
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking conditions must be met:
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD 1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the
indicator light on.
Selec-Terrain Knob.
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
Activating The Rear E-Locker
running.
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK
conditions must be met:
button once.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
NOTE:
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine • It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
running.
and forth to complete engagement and disengagement
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
of the E-Locker.
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK
button once.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in • The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD
LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a meswill begin to flash. When the shift is complete the
sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights
the requested shift.
in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete SELEC-TERRAIN™
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
Description
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for best performance for all terrains.
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. Rotate the Selec-Terrain™ knob to select the desired
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, mode.
below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and
left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to
align.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction
surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission
may use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
• Sport — This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
Selec-Terrain™ offers the following modes:
• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
• Sand/Mud — Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• Rock — Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
ruts, etc.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
NOTE: Rock mode is only available on the vehicles ordinary cars.
equipped with the Off-Road package.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactoappear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
Instrument Panel” for further information.
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
considered before entering the water:
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
CAUTION!
low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
details). This range should be limited to extreme situa- (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Drivlow speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in ing through water may cause damage that may not be
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
4WD LOW range.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady Maintenance
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
to minimize wave effects.
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not
Flowing Water
been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
drifting.
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “FourStanding Water
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
straight up or down.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, provide traction to complete the climb.
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Traction Downhill
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Control if equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
System⬙ in this section for further information). Let the
exhaust system for damage.
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
turning against engine compression drag. This will perrequired.
mit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suscan cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisvalues specified in the Service Manual.
sion whenever possible.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
propeller shafts.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
After Driving Off-Road
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
NOTE:
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and • Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
during parking maneuvers.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake switch is located in the center console. an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE warning lamp will
not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,
when the ignition switch is turned OFF. Once the parking
brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
while the parking brake is engaging.
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
The parking brake will release automatically when the
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechaignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
made to drive away.
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
WARNING!
brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch down
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
the back of the car while the parking brake disengages.
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveYou may also notice a small amount of movement in the
ment and possible injury or damage.
brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle Auto Park Brake
reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
brake will remain engaged.
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system.
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
turned off. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect® Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. the transmission is placed in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
For manual transmissions, the park brake will automatiSafehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:
System that will engage the park brake automatically if • The vehicle is at a standstill
the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
in RUN.
accelerator pedal
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are • The clutch pedal is not pressed
met:
• The seat belt is unbuckled
Safehold
• The vehicle is at a standstill
• The driver door is open
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
accelerator pedal
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.
Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again
• The seat belt is unbuckled
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
• The driver door is open
is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for • The vehicle must be at a standstill.
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
• The parking brake must be unapplied.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking
Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through
the Uconnect® Settings in your vehicle. This menu based
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault
lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
In addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle.
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support
(RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). Further, all
vehicles equipped with a two-speed power transfer unit
have Hill Descent Control (HDC) and some vehicles may
also be equipped with Selec Speed Control (SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction surfaces.
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work accurate signals for the computer.
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
ability, and control.
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis- • After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
tances, or brake damage.
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
slow speeds.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode
or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate • For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline.
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
is in PARK.
a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle
before this time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Towing With HSA
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an
incline while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Hill Descent Control
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
HDC has three states:
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the
with brake or throttle application)
gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling speeds:
vehicle speed)
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
Enabling HDC
activate
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the •
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
•
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
•
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)
•
• Parking brake is released
•
• Driver door is closed
•
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Deactivating HDC
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magniNOTE: During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for
tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
or is on an uphill grade.
chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set • Vehicle is shifted to park.
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Disabling HDC
Driver Override:
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or following conditions occur:
brake application at anytime.
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to
excess speed.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
for greater than 70 seconds.
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
cooled sufficiently.
Feedback to the driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the SelecTerrain knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
Selec Speed Control Switch
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling • Parking brake is released
engine torque and brakes.
• Driver door is closed
• Driver is not applying throttle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Activating SSC
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once •
the following conditions are met:
•
• Driver releases throttle
•
• Driver releases brake
•
• Transmission is in any selection other than P
•
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
•
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the •
SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a •
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC •
set speeds:
•
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Deactivating SSC
• These SSC default set speeds are dependent on hill SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the following conditions occur:
vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value
application.
being .6 mph (1 km/h).
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
• During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmis- • Vehicle is shifted to park.
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
Disabling SSC
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select ing conditions occur:
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. • The driver presses the SSC switch.
Driver Override:
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or • The parking brake is applied.
brake application at any time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
excess speed.
for greater than 70 seconds.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
(SSC exits immediately).
brakes.
Feedback To The Driver:
• Driver door opens.
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING! (Continued)
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
ESC On — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or
4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power
transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW
range. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial
Off” and to “Full Off” for additional information.
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC Partial Off — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Foursystem has up to three operating modes: “ESC On” Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
“Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESC normally allows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
WARNING! (Continued)
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
•
Trailer
Sway
Control (TSC) is disabled when the
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
ESC
system
is
in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily press the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ button and
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
the ⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light will turn off. This will restore
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
WARNING!
Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. Full Off — Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power And 4WD Low Range
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
tem is reduced.
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
above the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”
mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, the ⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light
will illuminate and an “ESC Off” message will appear in
the odometer.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the NOTE:
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At • “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When
the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW
the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
range.
the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The ⬙ESC
OFF⬙ indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is • The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK
Off” button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
position. This will occur even if the message was
of operation.
cleared previously.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acThe “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON driving to the prevailing road conditions.
position. It should go out with the engine
NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenlight remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowill be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC can be
off or full off.
disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and entering
“ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the “ESC
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off” modes. Refer to the ESC
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro- portion of this section for an explanation of the different
ESC operating modes.
priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
WARNING!
swaying trailer is recognized.
If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provide a torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield
wiper setting and only functions when they are in use.
When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
EXAMPLE:
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSnow Tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires checked before using these tire types.
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
safety and handling of your vehicle.
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediwas originally equipped with your vehicle and should
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infortire inflation pressures.
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
replaced.
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models withUse of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard • Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire
against damage.
sizes are not chainable.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as • The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
• Use on Front Tires Only
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction de- Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
vices are recommended:
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
sizes are not chainable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if
tire chains or traction devices are used with original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
unequal rates.
directional tires that must not be reversed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
5
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following
diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
mended cold placard pressure.
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about and natural pressure loss through the tire.
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warnpressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa- NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
tion.
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- readings to the receiver module.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level and to maintain the proper pressure.
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure MonitorThe TPMS consists of the following components:
ing Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the tire.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniVehicles With Full-Size Spare
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnmonitored by the TPMS.
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a
Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to
XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next ignition key
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
cycle.
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
ignition key cycle.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
solid.
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly display in the EVIC.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display
(DID) will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum
of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
5
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
being received.
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
can occur due to any of the following:
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
monitored by the TPMS.
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
TPMS sensors.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light”
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In
that affects radio wave signals.
addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low mes3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
sage, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing
housings.
the low tire pressure value in a different color.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different
4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
value. The EVIC/DID will also display a “SPARE
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
the flat tire.
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
Size Spare
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
spare tire.
message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
in place of the pressure value.
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followwill turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display ing licenses:
a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as
GQ4-61T
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning United States
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle Canada
1470A-42T
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive FUEL REQUIREMENTS
this information.
2.4L Engine
General Information
These engines are designed to meet all
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
emissions regulations and provide excelRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
lent fuel economy and performance when
following conditions:
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
• This device must accept any interference received,
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
including interference that may cause undesired opthese engines.
eration.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto
manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed
consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel
Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary
to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends
the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if
they are available.
3.2L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane premium
gasoline for optimum performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from
operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered
by the new vehicle warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following:
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
• Operate in a lean mode.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
MMT In Gasoline
• Poor engine performance.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug Fuel System Cautions
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
CAUTION!
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether performance:
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforand California reformulated gasoline.
mance and damage the emissions control system.
Materials Added To Fuel
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
or malfunctioning and may require immediate serconditions and they would result in additional cost.
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
assistance.
fuel.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap • Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinhear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
forcement.
properly tightened.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
driver’s side door trim).
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
2. Remove access door located on interior trim panel for
release cable with the tip of your key.
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
fuel filler door.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further review.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents Loading
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerlisted.
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
Inflation Pressure
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighall loading conditions up to full GAWR.
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way follow the requirements and recommendations in this
the brakes operate.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and and trailer when weighed in combination.
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaWARNING!
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) information.
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class IV Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
2.4L/Automatic
with or without
Trailer Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic
with Trailer Tow
Package
Model
Frontal Area
FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Maximum Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
5
FWD or 4WD
FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
200 lbs (91 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. your bumper or trailer hitch.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components, the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended:
put in or on your vehicle.
WARNING!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operpersonal injury.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
sures before trailer usage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
CAUTION!
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
you can get back to cruising speed.
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Cooling System
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid To reduce potential for engine and transmission overfrequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift- heating, take the following actions:
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range
City Driving
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transvehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
Highway Driving
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
Reduce speed.
provide better engine braking.
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF
the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
4WD Models
1-Speed Power
2-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
Transfer Unit
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
• Transmission in PARK
• Power transfer unit in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain 5. Release the parking brake.
will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Recreational Towing — 4WD Models With
1-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Recreational Towing — 4WD Models With
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreunit.
ational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is
adjacent to the power transfer unit selector switch. Shifts
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
5
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will
occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the power
transfer unit.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in
NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will
result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be seriously or fatally injured if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the
vehicle to move, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
5
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Start the engine.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
that there is no vehicle movement.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
Apply the parking brake.
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
OFF, and remove the key fob.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
tow bar.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
Release the parking brake.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the NOTE:
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
by the selector switch.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF may be required
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
to avoid gear clash.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
10. Release the brake pedal.
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .553 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .566
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .557
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
䡵 RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .583
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Models With 1–Speed
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Models With 2–Speed
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
an impending overheat condition:
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum properly calibrated torque wrench.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control Torque Specifications
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
Lug Nut/Bolt
**Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/Bolt
from the engine cooling system.
Torque
Bolt Size
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
M12 x 1.25
19 mm
WARNING!
(135 N·m)
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
The TIREFIT kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
TIREFIT Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose
(clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
6
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
use. Always replace these components immediately at
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
Hose Replacement”.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
valve stem.
to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igniNOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
tion.
nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
Tire:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the • Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRESealant Mode position.
FIT kit.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
deflated tire.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
On the TIREFIT kit.
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
empty.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the TIREFIT kit.
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
use. Call for assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceinflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
ment”.
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflausing the TIREFIT service kit.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
12 Volt outlet.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
vehicle.
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
6
Load Floor Handle
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
4. Remove the chocks.
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from points holds the jack handle in place.
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove 6. Remove the spare tire.
the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the right
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Preparations For Jacking
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
6
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jacking Locations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
6
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Engagement Point
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
use, and operation.
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
NOTE:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Assembled Jack
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING! (Continued)
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
Road Tire Installation
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
authorized dealer or service station.
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Preparations For Jump-Start
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
precautions.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
WARNING!
Positive Battery Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, press
and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back
and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic
transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
chains, or winch cables.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using Recovery Strap
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of
your recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
recommended anchor points or emergency towing
anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any
other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has
reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps.
ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious
injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 feet from the
recovery area when using the recovery strap.
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
secure and parked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
1. Turn the engine OFF.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vethe shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center hicles may also be towed as described under “Recreconsole bezel.
ational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
2. Apply the parking brake.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the shift lever override access hole (at the right front
corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4X4 MODELS
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
FWD MODELS
Wheel Lift
or
Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
BEST
METHOD
Flatbed
Front
ALL
NOT
ALLOWED
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
See instructions under
“Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
position, not the ACC position.
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
so that the vehicle can be moved.
wheels raised).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Models With 1–Speed
Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Models With 2–Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed instructions.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power
Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction,
with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following
conditions:
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
• The transmission must be in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .595
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Front Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
▫ Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .643
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
— Oil Fill Cap
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel PROGRAMS
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
“CHECK gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
For states that require an Inspection and MainteInformation Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
further information. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
system is ready for testing.
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
properly tightened.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replaceIf the problem persists, the message will appear the next
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
not crank or start the engine.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
start this test over.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part may then indicate that the system is now ready.
of a normal bulb check.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
happen:
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
WARNING!
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle You can be badly injured working on or around a
Limited Warranty.
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
REPLACEMENT PARTS
DEALER SERVICE
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Checking Oil Level
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at your engine.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a Change Engine Oil
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interat the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
the top of the safe zone on these engines.
whichever occurs first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine
Materials Added To Engine Oil
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ber should not be used.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Engine Oil Filter
WARNING!
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
filters and are recommended.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
maintenance intervals.
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomNOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi- mended.
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a —
If Equipped
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechamaintenance intervals.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
1 — Wiper Arm
liftgate glass.
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
against you.
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
WARNING!
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specificaYou or others can be badly burned by hot engine
tions, should be obtained immediately.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
motion.
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
needed to be added to the system please contact your
down the face of the condenser.
local authorized dealer.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
entire system for leaks.
MS-12106).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
maintenance intervals.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Engine Coolant Checks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionvent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainAdditive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) tain the proper level of protection against freezing acthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
spills immediately.
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
components.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
condenser clean.
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
for leaks.
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Brake System
Brake Master Cylinder
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
system components should be inspected periodically. performing under hood services or immediately if the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper “Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
maintenance intervals.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
WARNING!
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
possible brake damage. You would not have your full may be needed.
braking capacity in an emergency.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
packaged and sealed.
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
ner:
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting use protectants or other products, which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
WARNING!
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
rag.
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F06
F07
Blade Fuse
—
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module - PCM
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Cavity
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
Blade Fuse
25 Amp Clear
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
40 Amp Green
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Not Used
Power Takeoff Unit (PTU)
Not Used
Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power
Take-Off Unit (PTU) – If Equipped / Brake
System Module (BSM)
Not Used
Powertrain
Not Used
Not Used
Starter Solenoid
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
—
5 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
—
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
—
10 Amp Red
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
30 Amp Pink
—
—
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
Not Used
Not Used
Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
Not Used
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Not Used
Not Used
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Cavity
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
Blade Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
—
—
50 Amp Red
F38
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
—
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
50 Amp Red
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Driver Door Module (DDM) - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 3
Not Used
Not Used
Voltage Stabilization Module (VSM) If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
Radiator Fan
Glow Plugs - Diesel Only - If Equipped
HVAC Blower Motor
Trailer Tow Park Light - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Left
Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Light If Equipped
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
Blade Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
—
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
F55
10 Amp Red
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector - If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - If Equipped
Sunroof - If Equipped
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
Not Used
Power Inverter (115V A/C) - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
BSM-ECU & Valves
Urea Heater Control Unit - If Equipped With
Diesel Engine
Blind Spot Sensors / Compass / Rearview
Camera If Equipped / Rear Seat Heater
Switches / Trunk Lamp W/ Flashlamp Charger
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Cavity
F56
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
—
F57
F58
F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F65
15 Amp Blue
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF
Hub/Electric Steering Column Lock (ESL)
Fuel Pump Motor
Occupant Classification Module
Not Used
Power Outlet - Center Console
Not Used
Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel / Rear Heated Seats If Equipped
HVAC (ECC) / Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F66
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
—
F67
F68
F69
—
—
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
F70
F71
F72
—
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
—
—
—
F72
20 Amp Yellow
—
F73
—
30 Amp Pink
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
In Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity
Sensor / Driver Assist System Module
(DASM) / Park Assist (PAM)
Not Used
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) / Active
Grill Shutter (AGS) - If Equipped
Not Used
Windshield De-Icer - If Equipped
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) If Equipped
With Stop/Start Engine Option
Trailer Tow RT Stop / Turn Lights If Equipped
Rear Defroster / Defogger
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Cavity
F74
Blade Fuse
—
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
F75
F76
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
F77
F78
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
—
—
F79
10 Amp Red
—
F80
F81
F82
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Engine Control Module (ECM) Gasoline
Engine - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Rear Differential Module (RDM) If Equipped
Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port / Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM) / Digital TV - If Equipped
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC / Aux
Switch Bank Module (ASBM) / Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Radio / CD - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F83
F84
Blade Fuse
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
F84
—
20 Amp Blue
F85
F86
F87
F88
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
—
—
—
—
F89
F90
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Headlamp Washer Pump - If Equipped
Brake System Module (BSM) - Pump Motor
If Equipped With Diesel Engine
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped With
Gasoline Engine
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM) /
Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart Camera
Module - If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling - If Equipped
Not Used
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Cavity
F91
F92
F93
Blade Fuse
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
40 Amp Green
F94
F95
—
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
—
F96
F97
F98
F99
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
—
—
—
—
30 Amp Pink
F100
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Not Used
Rear Power Outlet
Brake System Module (BSM) - Pump Motor If Equipped With Gasoline Engine
Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Right
Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain Sensor /
Sunroof - If Equipped
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Audio Amplifier - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Module - If Equipped With
Gasoline Engine
Not Used
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
Blade Fuse
Description
F13
15 Amp Blue
Low Beam Left
F32
10 Amp Red
Interior Lighting
F36
10 Amp Red
Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
F38
20 Amp Yellow
Deadbolt All Unlock
F43
20 Amp Yellow
Washer Pump Front
F48
25 Amp Clear
Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
F49
7.5 Amp Brown
Lumbar Support
F50
7.5 Amp Brown
Wireless Charging Pad If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Cavity
Blade Fuse
Description
F51
10 Amp Red
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53
7.5 Amp Brown
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89
10 Amp Red
Door Locks – Driver Unlock
F91
7.5 Amp Brown
Fog Lamp Front Left
F92
7.5 Amp Brown
Fog Lamp Front Right
F93
10 Amp Red
Low Beam Right
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 Interior Bulbs
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
Cargo Lamp
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Overhead Console Lamp
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Reading Lamp
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Exterior Bulbs
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
Low Beam/High Beam
started again.
(Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime
Running Lamps
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Bulb Number
TL212–2
PLW214–2A
WL212–2
Bulb Number
HIR2
D3S (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
(Trailhawk)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps
License Plate Lamp
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
WY21W
H11
PSX24W
LED ( Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
WY21W
LED (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
W16W
W5W
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off and the key removed.
Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID
headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light
source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, 3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
unlock it.
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Unlock upper access door in wheel liner.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and Front Fog Lamp
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
8. Lock upper door in wheel liner.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
Front Turn Signals
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
1. Open the hood.
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
housing.
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replaceassembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
ment bulb.
2. Twist the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise,
and then remove the bulb and socket assembly from
CAUTION!
the lamp housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacecontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
ment bulb.
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, bulb with rubbing alcohol.
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the 5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
to lock it in place.
lamp housing until it locks in place.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
1.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. 2.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
3.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
Open the liftgate.
Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
the vehicle.
Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
10. Close the liftgate.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
Back-up Lamp
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
1. Open the liftgate.
11. Close the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the License Plate Lamp
lower trim from the liftgate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
the lamp assembly for removal.
panel.
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
lamp.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
7.2 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Metric
60 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.8 Liters
9.5 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Spark Plugs –
Spark Plugs –
Fuel Selection
Fuel Selection
2.4L Engine
3.2L Engine
– 2.4L Engine
– 3.2L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87-89 Octane
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should
be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
652 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 653 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 654 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
E
N Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
A
N
C Or Years:
E
Or Kilometers:
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E
D Inspect the CV joints.
U Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
L and replace if necessary.
E Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
S
8 Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 655 M
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine **
Replace spark plugs – 3.2L Engine **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 656 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
C
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .663
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .660
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .663
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .660
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .664
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
658 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .665
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 659
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
660 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
P.O. Box 1621
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
ter should include the following information:
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 661
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
662 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 663
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminiREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
strator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
information about motor vehicle safety from http://
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
MOPAR® PARTS
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
664 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 665
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
668 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .189
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .603
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 669
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .403
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .300
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
670 INDEX
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . .
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .284 Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
. . . . . . . .648 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
. . . . . . . .525
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .106
. . . . . . . .593
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
. . . . . . . .616
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
. . . . . . . .116
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .99
. . . . . . . .315
. . . . . . . .313 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
. . . . . . . .313 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
. . . . . . . .313 Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
. . . . . . . .314
. . . . . . . .623 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
. . . . . . . .392 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
. . . . . . . .528 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
. . . . . . . .566 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
. . . . . . . .482 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Light) . . .596 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
. . . . . . . .115 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 671
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.661
.616
.612
.615
.648
.617
.617
.613
.613
.617
.616
.616
.614
.623
.189
.309
.659
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
672 INDEX
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . .
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.300
.451
.134
.459
.434
.463
.185
.474
.284
.335
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.553
.566
.578
.553
.596
.593
.603
.423
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 673
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.603
.412
.603
.602
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.421
.310
.650
.648
.119
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.619
.600
.649
.170
.645
.157
.216
.443
.582
.519
.523
.521
.521
10
674 INDEX
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Specifications . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.525
.519
.332
.523
.521
.519
.519
.649
.648
.629
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
.286 Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.525
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.521
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.519
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.521
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .332
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .332
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.330
.326
.428
.585
.212
.627
.531
.530
.528
. . . . . . . . .553
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.167
.644
.627
.167
.172
.170
.167
INDEX 675
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.173
.643
.166
.167
.154
.154
.136
.393
.423
.326
.172
.343
.466
.464
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
. . .534 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
. . .310 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178
. . .309 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
676 INDEX
.570 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
.567 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
.566
.578 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 677
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .333
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .175
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .333
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .330
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
678 INDEX
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .333 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 679
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . .
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . .
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.326
.326
.600
.648
.600
.600
.600
.602
.603
.602
.601
.602
.601
.602
.601
.603
.603
.595
.286
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .488
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
680 INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .300
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.495
.616
.392
.390
.181
.284
.144
.232
.157
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .546
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .549
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 681
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .390
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . .33
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .60
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
682 INDEX
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 683
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .390
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.326
.183
.403
.332
.314
.183
.167
.420
.488
.556
.481
.119
.501
.492
10
684 INDEX
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.504
.566
.498
.492
.495
.494
.566
.501
.488
.508
.330
.665
.495
.502
.506
.481
.482
.497
.500
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.539
.501
.481
.536
.164
.530
.585
.535
.543
.535
.543
.462
.530
.542
.534
.537
.536
.540
.535
INDEX 685
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .286
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
686 INDEX
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2014 Cherokee
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14KL74-126-AF
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement